Reference Guide

ManualsBrandsDell ManualsLaptopStudio 1749

ﺕﺎﺤﻠﻄﺼﻤﻟﺍ ﻢﺠﻌﻣ 356

ﺎﻫﺭﺪﻗ ﺔﻣﻭﺎﻘﻣ ﻝﻼﺧ ﻦﻣ ﺪﺣﺍﻭ ﺖﻟﻮﻓ ﺪﻟﻮﺘﻳﻭ .ﺔﻴﺑﺮﻬﻜﻟﺍ ﺔﻴﻛﺮﺤﻟﺍ ﺓﻮﻘﻟﺍ ﻭﺃ ﺔﻴﺑﺮﻬﻜﻟﺍ ﺓﺭﺪﻘﻟﺍ ﺱﺎﻴﻗ - ﺖﻟﻮﻓ - V

.ﺔﻣﻭﺎﻘﻤﻟﺍ ﻩﺬﻫ ﻝﻼﺧ ﺪﺣﺍﻭ ﺮﻴﺒﻣﺃ ﻪﺗﺪﺷ ﻎﻠﺒﺗ ﺭﺎﻴﺗ ﻱﺮﺴﻳ ﺎﻣﺪﻨﻋ ﺪﺣﺍﻭ "ﻡﻭﺃ"

ﺎﻬﻀﻌﺑ ﻊﻣ ﻞﺻﺍﻮﺘﺗ ﻲﺘﻟﺍﻭ ﺔﻠﺼﺘﻤﻟﺍ ﺮﺗﻮﻴﺒﻤﻜﻟﺍ ﺓﺰﻬﺟﺃ ﻦﻣ ﺔﻋﻮﻤﺠﻣ .ﺔﻴﻠﺤﻤﻟﺍ ﺔﻴﻜﻠﺳﻼﻟﺍ ﺔﻜﺒﺸﻟﺍ - WLAN

.ﺖﻧﺮﺘﻧﻹﺎﺑ ﻝﺎﺼﺗﻻﺍ ﺮﻴﻓﻮﺘﻟ ﺔﻴﻜﻠﺳﻻ ﻪﻴﺟﻮﺗ ﺓﺰﻬﺟﺃ ﻭﺃ ﻝﺎﺼﺗﺍ ﻁﺎﻘﻧ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺎﺑ ءﺍﻮﻬﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﺟﻮﻣ ﺮﺒﻋ

ﺔﻳﻮﻠﺨﻟﺍ ﺔﻴﻨﻘﺘﻟﺍ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﺗ ﺔﻋﺮﺴﻟﺍ ﺔﻴﻟﺎﻋ ﺔﻴﻜﻠﺳﻻ ﺕﺎﻧﺎﻴﺑ ﺔﻜﺒﺷ .ﺔﻌﺳﺍﻮﻟﺍ ﺔﻴﻜﻠﺳﻼﻟﺍ ﺔﻜﺒﺸﻟﺍ - WWAN

.WLAN ﺔﻜﺒﺷ ﺎﻬﻴﻄﻐﺗ ﻲﺘﻟﺍ ﻚﻠﺗ ﻦﻣ ﺮﺒﻛﺃ ﺔﻴﻓﺍﺮﻐﺟ ﺔﺣﺎﺴﻣ ﻲﻄﻐﺗﻭ

ﻢﻋﺪﺗ ﻮﻳﺪﻴﻔﻟﺍ ﻲﻓ ﻢﻜﺤﺘﻟﺍ ﺕﺍﺪﺣﻭﻭ ﺕﺎﻗﺎﻄﺒﻟ ﻮﻳﺪﻴﻓ ﺭﺎﻴﻌﻣ - ﺔﻣﺪﻘﺘﻣ ﺓﺪﺘﻤﻣ ﺲﻜﻴﻓﺍﺮﺟ ﺔﻓﻮﻔﺼﻣ - WXGA

.1280 x 800 ﻰﻟﺇ ﻞﺼﺗ ﺡﻮﺿﻮﻟﺍ ﺔﻗﺩ ﻦﻣ ﺕﺎﺟﺭﺩ

ﺕﺎﺟﺭﺩ ﻢﻋﺪﺗ ﻮﻳﺪﻴﻔﻟﺎﺑ ﻢﻜﺤﺘﻟﺍ ﺕﺍﺪﺣﻭﻭ ﻮﻳﺪﻴﻔﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻗﺎﻄﺒﻟ ﻮﻳﺪﻴﻓ ﺭﺎﻴﻌﻣ - ﺓﺪﺘﻤﻣ ﺲﻜﻴﻓﺍﺮﺟ ﺔﻓﻮﻔﺼﻣ - XGA

.1024 x 768 ﻰﻟﺇ ﻞﺼﺗ ﺔﻗﺪﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ

ﺎﻬﻜﻓ ﻭﺃ ﺮﺗﻮﻴﺒﻤﻛ ﺔﻗﺎﻗﺭ ﺐﻴﻛﺮﺘﺑ ﺢﻤﺴﻳ ﻞﻴﺻﻮﺘﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﺤﺘﻓ ﻭﺃ ﺱﺎﺒﻘﻤﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﻉﻮﻧ - ﺔﻳﺮﻔﺻ ﻝﺎﺧﺩﺇ ﺔﻄﻘﻧ - ZIF

.ﺲﺒﻘﻤﻟﺍ ﻭﺃ ﺔﺤﻳﺮﺸﻟﺍ ﻰﻠﻋ ﻂﻐﺿ ﻱﺃ ﻖﻴﺒﻄﺗ ﻥﻭﺩ

Zip ﺕﺎﻔﻠﻣ Zip ﻖﻴﺴﻨﺗ ﺔﻄﺳﺍﻮﺑ ﺔﻃﻮﻐﻀﻤﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻔﻠﻤﻟﺍ ﻰﻤﺴﺗﻭ .ﺕﺎﻧﺎﻴﺒﻟﺍ ﻂﻐﻀﻟ ﻊﺋﺎﺷ ﻖﻴﺴﻨﺗ - Zip

ﻲﺗﺍﺫ ﻒﻠﻤﻟﺍ ﻮﻫ ﺔﻃﻮﻐﻀﻤﻟﺍ ﺕﺎﻔﻠﻤﻟﺍ ﻦﻣ ﺹﺎﺧ ﻉﻮﻧ ﻙﺎﻨﻫﻭ ..zip ﻖﺤﻠﻤﻟﺍ ﺓﺩﺎﻋ ﺎﻬﻤﺳﺍ ﻦ

ﻤﻀﺘﻳﻭ

ﺝﻭﺩﺰﻤﻟﺍ ﺮﻘﻨﻟﺎﺑ ﺝﺍﺮﺨﺘﺳﻻﺍ ﻲﺗﺍﺫ ﻒﻠﻣ ﻚﻓ ﻚﻨﻜﻤﻳﻭ ..exe ﻢﺳﻻﺍ ﻖﺤﻠﻣ ﻪﻤﺳﺍ ﻦ

ﻤﻀﺘﻳ ﻱﺬﻟﺍﻭ ،ﺝﺍﺮﺨﺘﺳﻻﺍ

.ﻪﻗﻮﻓ

Summary of content (356 pages)

PAGE 1
‫‪V‬‬ ‫‪ - V‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ -‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻟﺪ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫"ﺃﻭﻡ" ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺷﺪﺗﻪ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫‪ - WLAN‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - WWAN‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺳﻌﺔ‪ .
PAGE 2
‫‪ - SVGA‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺟﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﺲ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻟـ ‪ SVGA‬ﻫﻲ ‪ 800 x 600‬ﻭ ‪.1024 x 768‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - SXGA‬ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺟﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﺲ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 3
‫‪ - RFI‬ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 100.000‬ﻣﻴﻐﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - ROM‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ -‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺧﻼﻓﺎً ﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ،ROM‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ RAM‬ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 4
‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪ - NIC‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺤﻮّﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫‪ - NVRAM‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ‪ -‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎً ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻧﻪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ NVRAM‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪ - PC Card‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ )‪ (I/O‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻭﺗﻠﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .
PAGE 5
‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪ - G‬ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﻠﻮﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - GUI‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I‬‬ ‫‪ - IDE‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.CD‬‬ ‫‪ - IEEE 1394‬ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﻌﻬﺪ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ‪Institute of Electrical and‬‬ ‫‪ - Electronics Engineers, Inc.
PAGE 6
‫‪ - DMA‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ RAM‬ﻭﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - DMTF‬ﻗﻮﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻋﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺷﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻭﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - DRAM‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺜﻔﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 7
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪ - ACPI‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫®‪ Microsoft® Windows‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ - AGP‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﻉ ‪ -‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﺠﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﺲ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﻉ ‪ AGP‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ - Hz‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺎﺱ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ (kHz‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ (MHz‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ (GHz‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺮﺍ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫)‪.(THz‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪ - DVI‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻁ ‪ -‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻁ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮﺍً ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺮﻱ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪ -‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺘﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ‪ -‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻭﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ‪) CPU‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺮﺗﺰ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺘﻪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ )ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ(‪ .
PAGE 10
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ‪ -‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ُﺗﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺃﺑﺠﺪﻳﺎً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ‪ً ،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ‪ - DVD+RW‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ ،DVD+RW‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ(‪) .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ DVD+RW‬ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪(DVD-RW‬‬ ‫ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ -‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ - S-video‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ -‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻧﻨﺎ ﻧﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﻭﻣﺎً ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﻄﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪RAM‬‬ ‫)ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪) ROM‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺮﺍﺩﻓﺔ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪."RAM‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ -‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .
PAGE 14
‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ‪ -‬ﻛﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ٍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﻣﻦ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺼﺤﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ setup.exe‬ﺃﻭ ‪ install.exe‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ‪ .Windows‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ -‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻣﻌﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺠﻢ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﺣﺎً‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤّﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴّﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪ - I/O -‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ -‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .
PAGE 17
‫‪340‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻼء ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪.800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﻂ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪.Dell‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ‪ Dell‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ Dell‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺯﺭ ‪.support.dell.
PAGE 19
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ )ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻛﻮﺩﻱ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻇﻬﺮﻩ(‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺨﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺠﻌﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪:(Dell‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ؟ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ .
PAGE 20
‫‪ 2‬ﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺧﻄﺎﺏ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺿﻊ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(338‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻳﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫‪) Diagnostics‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ "Dell Diagnostics‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(284‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺗﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء )ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺟﺎﻋﻪ )ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ ﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺒﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻋﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻟﻬﺎ(‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪AutoTech‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ Dell‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺘﺔ—‪ —AutoTech‬ﺇﺟﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Dell‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ ،AutoTech‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺘﻚ‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Dell‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪www.dell.com‬‬ ‫‪) www.dell.com/ap‬ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻵﺳﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪) www.dell.com/jp‬ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪) www.euro.dell.com‬ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫‪) www.dell.com/la‬ﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻼﺗﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﻳﺒﻲ(‬ ‫‪) www.dell.ca‬ﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ Dell‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪) Dell Support‬ﺩﻋﻢ ‪(Dell‬‬ ‫‪support.dell.com‬‬ ‫‪) support.jp.dell.
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ Dell‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ‪ Dell‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪) Dell Accessories‬ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ (Dell‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍً ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎً ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪) Express Service Code‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ّ 273‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪332‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ‬
PAGE 26
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ )ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪ /‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ )ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء( ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.
PAGE 27
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ RCA) S/PDIF‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ(‬ ‫)‪ Sony/Philips Digital Interconnect Format (S/PDIF‬ﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪ CD‬ﻭ‪ DVD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪ً S/PDIF‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻼ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪ 75‬ﺃﻭﻡ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪ RCA‬ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻴﺎﻑ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻨﻬﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪) Toslink‬ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪.(Toshiba‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ‪S/PDIF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 28
‫™‪DisplayPort‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ DisplayPort‬ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ .(VESA‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻌﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺕﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫"™‪ - DisplayPort‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )‪ (HDMI‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ HDMI‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﻭﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻛﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ LUMA‬ﻭ‪ CHROMA‬ﻭ‪) SYNC‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌًﺎ ﺑـ ‪CVSB‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﺐ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ(‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ LUMA‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺒﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺑـ ‪ .SYNC‬ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ‪ CHROMA‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ‪ VHS‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 31
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﻣﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ‪.Y‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﻓﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻢ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺑـ ‪ Y-B‬ﻭﻟﻠﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺑـ ‪.Y-R‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ Y‬ﻭ‪ Y-B‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 32
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪S-Video‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ )‪ ،(S-Video‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﻑ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ‪ ،Y/C‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﺈﺷﺎﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﺎ ‪) luma‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ‪) chroma‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ‪ DVD‬ﺟﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 33
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪DVI-I‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪) DVI-I‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ( ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻟﻶﺧﺮ )ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ DVI-I‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪) DVI-D‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪-‬ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ‪) DVI-A‬ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪-‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪VGA‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (VGA‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ )‪(PS2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PS/2‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ IBM‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪ ،1987‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .2/‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ PS/2‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪Ethernet‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻹﻳﺜﺮﻧﺖ ﺯﻭﺟﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ‪ DSL‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪.(ISP‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪ .‬ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺧﻂ )ﺃﻭ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ( ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ )ﺃﻭ ﻳﺤﻤﻞ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ(‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪eSATA‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺪ ‪) SATA‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ( ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻲﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻮ ﻧﺎﻗﻞ ‪ SATA‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ eSATA‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ SATA‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .
PAGE 39
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 8‬ﺑﺖ )‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 8‬ﺑﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 8‬ﺑﺖ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺻﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫‪ Centronics‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ‪RS232‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .RS-232‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺷﺎﺋﻊ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪IEEE 1394‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻌﺪ ‪ IEEE 1394‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ USB 2.0‬ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 480‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ‪IEEE 1394b‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 800‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ IEEE 1394‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 42
‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ )‪(USB‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 480‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺖ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .USB 2.0‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪Plug-and-Play‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﺱ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ A‬ﺗﺘﺠﻪ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 43
‫‪ 4‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) Export Compliance Disclaimer‬ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﺧﻼء ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﺪﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Yes, I Accept this Agreement‬ﻧﻌﻢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﻔﺎﻗﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) File Download‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Save this program to disk‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) Save In‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Save In‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﻓﻲ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Desktop‬ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Save‬ﺣﻔﻆ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪BIOS‬‬ ‫ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ BIOS‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ BIOS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،BIOS‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 309‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ DELL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪) Boot Order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ( ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻻ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪CD/DVD/CD-RW‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻳﻔﺤﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻧﺸﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ‪) Options‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪) Help‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫)ﻧﻈﺮﺍً ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎً‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪) External Hot Key‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪) Documentation‬ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪) Documentation‬ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .
PAGE 50
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻈﻞ ً‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺿﺎء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻴﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻴﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.275‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺻﺒﻮﻭﻓﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺒﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 60‬ﺳﻢ )‪ 2‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ‪ -‬ﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ( ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) Mouse‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪) Pointing Devices‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺷﻴﺮ( ﻓﻲ ‪) Dell Diagnostics‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫‪ "Diagnostics‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(284‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ" ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.81‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) Hardware Troubleshooter‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ( ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪) Windows Hardware Troubleshooter‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﻣﺼﻠﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ "(Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.284‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪ -‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ(‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪-‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Hardware and‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Sound‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ‪) Scanners and Cameras‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪-‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Hardware and‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Sound‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ‪) Printers‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ( ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Ports‬ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ -‬ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻴﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ‪) ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ‪) Service Manual‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯﻙ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) Dell Diagnostics‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ "Dell Diagnostics‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(284‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.www.dell.
PAGE 59
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ "Dell‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ -‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﻞ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪-‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪
PAGE 61
‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ‪) Pick a Category‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﺌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Performance and Maintenance‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ( ‪) System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ‪) System Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ‪Hardware‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ( ‪) Device Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ IEEE 1394‬ﻣﻦ ‪ - Dell‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪) Dell‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ "Dell‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Add or Remove‬‬ ‫‪) Programs‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪) Programs and Features‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Uninstall‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪drive letter :\ is not accessible. The device is not ready‬‬ ‫)‪ :drive letter‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ( ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ COM‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ( ‪) Diagnostics‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ( ‬ ‫‪) Query Modem‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ( ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Windows‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Printers and Other‬‬ ‫‪) Hardware‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ( ‪) Phone and Modem Options‬ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ( ‪) Modems‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ(‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﻮﻥ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .
PAGE 65
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻻﻧﺰﻻﻕ ﻭﺳﺤﺒﻪ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.303‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪ -‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻓﻘﺎً ً‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺤﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .
PAGE 66
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ®‪ Microsoft® Windows‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪-‬‬ ‫®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ ﺛﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Computer‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﺪﺭﺟﺎً‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ‪) Service Manual‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑـ ‪) Dell‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ(‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) Dell Support Center‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪(Dell‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫‪) Self Help‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻴﺔ( ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Assistance From Dell‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ - (Dell‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‪.
PAGE 68
‫‪ 5‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪Main Menu‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Dell Diagnostics‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Main Menu‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ‪) Dell Drivers and Utilities‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ(‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪ 2‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Test System‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Extended Test‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﺘﺪ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪Express Test‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬ ‫‪Extended Test‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪ(‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 10‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﺤﺺ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ DELL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺒﺪء ‪ Dell Diagnostics‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Dell Diagnostics‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ "Dell Diagnostics‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.287‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Dell Diagnostics‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ "Dell‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.339‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Dell Diagnostics‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Dell Diagnostics‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻟﻸﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Dell Diagnostics‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء "‪"Contacting Dell‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ (Dell‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ )ﻣﻮﱠﺻﻞ( ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪) Windows Hardware Troubleshooter‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺼﻠﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) HardwareTroubleshooter‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ( ﻟﺤﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ‪) hardware troubleshooter‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪
PAGE 74
‫‪Your power adapter does not supply enough power to run the‬‬ ‫‪attached docking station. either undock or insert an appropriate‬‬ ‫‪) adapter. strike the F1 key to shutdown‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Your system is docked, but the AC adapter type cannot be‬‬ ‫‪determined. either undock or insert an appropriate adapter.
PAGE 75
‫‪WARNING: The primary battery cannot be identiﬁed. this system‬‬ ‫‪will be unable to charge batteries until this battery is removed‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ‪ -‬ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪WARNING: The second battery cannot be identiﬁed.
PAGE 76
‫‪The computer is docked and only battery power is detected. this‬‬ ‫‪can happen if the power adapter is missing, the power cord is‬‬ ‫‪unplugged, or the computer is not properly connected to the‬‬ ‫‪docking station. you should undock, redock, attach the power‬‬ ‫‪adapter, or plug in the power cord. strike the F1 key to shutdown‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻼ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻔﻘﻮﺩﺍً ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎء‪ .
PAGE 77
‫‪) Read failure on second internal hard drive‬ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ( ‪ -‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.291‬‬ ‫‪) RTC mode ﬁxed – time and date may be wrong‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ RTC‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻄﺄ( ‪ -‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪) system setup program‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 78
‫‪) Keyboard failure‬ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ‪ -‬ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(296‬‬ ‫‪Memory address line failure at (address), read value expecting‬‬ ‫)‪) (value‬ﻓﺸﻞ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ( ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ )ﻗﻴﻤﺔ(( ‪ -‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺍﻣﺮ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪) No boot device available‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ( ‪ -‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﺎﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﻪ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﻬﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻴﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺻﻼﻥ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ‪) Service Manual‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ( ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻴﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻴﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.www.dell.
PAGE 83
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻭﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺸﻤﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪Hardware‬‬ ‫‪Troubleshooter‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﻣﺼﻠﺤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫‪Dell Diagnostics‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫‪Dell‬‬ ‫‪274‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻣﺼﻤﺘﺎ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻃﺎﻗ
PAGE 84
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ(‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Windows XP‬ﺃﻭ ‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪) Operating System‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ .Windows XP‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Windows XP‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻨﺼﺤﻚ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻤﺜﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪.
PAGE 86
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Conﬁrm Data Deletion‬ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﺩ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ ،Factory Image Restore‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء( ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Dell™ PC Restore‬ﻭ‪Dell Factory‬‬ ‫‪Image Restore‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Dell PC Restore‬ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪Dell Factory Image‬‬ ‫‪ Restore‬ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩ ‪ System Restore‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫ ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Accessories‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ( ‪) System Tools‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ‪System‬‬ ‫‪) Restore‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Undo my last restoration‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪) System Restore‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(؛ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﺍ؛ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ Windows XP‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ‪) Start Search‬ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ‪ System Restore‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪ System Restore‬ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) System Restore‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﻛﺄﻭﻝ ﺣﻞ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 91
Microsoft® Windows® XP Pro Remote Desktop 266
PAGE 92
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫‪.No-IP.com‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ No-IP.com‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻠﻘﻤﺎﺕ ‪ No-IP.com‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﻠﻘﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ No-IP.com‬ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ‪ Remote Desktop‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Desktop Connection‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪.(VPN‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﺫﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ Professional‬ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪Microsoft® Windows® XP Pro‬‬ ‫‪Remote Desktop‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ‪ Remote Desktop‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ Microsoft Windows XP Professional‬ﻟﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ Remote Desktop‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Remote Desktop‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪ Remote Desktop‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻛﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.
PAGE 95
‫‪262‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‬
PAGE 96
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻋﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻀﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺤﺼﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪Windows Help and‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﺯﻳﻞ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺱ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ؟‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﻋﺮﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺼﺎﺑًﺎ ﺑﻔﻴﺮﻭﺱ؟‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .
PAGE 98
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻣﻨﻴًﺎ ‪ -‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻣﻨﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺸﻮﻓﺎ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻣﻨﺔ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺟﺪﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪" ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ :Windows‬ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ" ﻓﻲ ‪Windows Help and Support‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪ .‬ﻭﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ "ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ" ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.183‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ِﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻔﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﺍﻹﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪?.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺒﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻫﻮﻳﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪) Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ (Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 102
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻛﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) User Account‬ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪) Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ (Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﻤﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻳﺸﺘﺮﻛﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻠﻚ ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻌﻮﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪) Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ (Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﺭﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ—ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻠﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪ Microsoft® Windows‬ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺃﻣﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻠﻚ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .
PAGE 105
‫‪252‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
PAGE 106
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻦ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪) Microsoft Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫‪ (Windows‬ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪) Display Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،
PAGE 108
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﻘﻠﻚ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Nvidia‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪.Nvidia‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Nvidia‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪Control Panel Help‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪:Nvidia‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Personalize‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ(‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪Personalize appearance‬‬ ‫‪) and sounds‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‪.
PAGE 110
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Display Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ‪Advanced Settings‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺼﻨّﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪) Display Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Settings‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ Advanced‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .
PAGE 111
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Display‬‬ ‫‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻓﻲ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪Windows Help and‬‬ ‫‪) Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪.(Windows‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Troubleshoot‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻘﻠﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Video‬‬ ‫‪) Display Troubleshooter‬ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺼﻠﺤﻬﺎ( ﻓﻲ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪) Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪.
PAGE 112
‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Display‬‬ ‫‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Display Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪) Settings‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Settings‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Settings‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) Troubleshoot‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﻘﻠﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪) Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪.
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Settings Tab‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﻓﻲ ‪Display‬‬ ‫‪) Properties Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Personalize‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ(‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪Personalize appearance‬‬ ‫‪) and sounds‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Display Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫"‪Setting Display Resolution With the Windows Display‬‬ ‫‪) Properties‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ "(Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.243‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ٍ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 115
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪Display Properties‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪Extend my Windows‬‬ ‫‪) desktop onto this monitor‬ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ‪ Windows‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Apply‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎً ﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 116
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Settings‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺷﺎﺷﺘﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ .2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻨﺠﺢ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪) Display‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪) Windows Display Properties Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Display Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 118
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ RCA‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 119
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ S/PDIF‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪S/PDIF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ S/PDIF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.
PAGE 120
‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ RCA‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ‪ S/PDIF‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪S-video‬‬ ‫‪TV-out‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ S-video TV-out‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 121
‫‪ S-Video‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪S-video‬‬ ‫‪TV-out‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ S-video‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ S-video TV-out‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ‪.
PAGE 122
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺩﻭﻧﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻱ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ً‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﺮ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﻧﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ S-video TV-out‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 123
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ S/PDIF‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪S/PDIF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪ S/PDIF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ‪ S/PDIF‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪S-video‬‬ ‫‪TV-out‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ً‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﺮ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﻧﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ S-video‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ S-video TV-out‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪.
PAGE 125
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ S-video TV-out‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 126
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻠﻲ ‪ RCA‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪S-video‬‬ ‫‪TV-out‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ً‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﻔﺮ ًﺩﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﻧﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 127
‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪ S-video‬ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪S-video TV-out‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ S-video‬ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪S-video‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ S-video‬ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪.S/PDIF‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ S-video‬ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ S-video‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﻣﺎﺫﺍ ﺗﻔﻌﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ S-Video‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ‪.S-Video 1‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪ S-Video‬ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟـ ‪.S-Video 1‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.(S-Video 1) AV3 8‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Display Properties Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ً‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ "‪ ."Menu‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ Menu‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 130
‫‪-S/PDIF‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻌًﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ S/PDIF‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫‪.S/PDIF‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻒ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﺻﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟـ‪ AV5‬ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟـ‪ ،AV6‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻼﻥ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑـ‪ AV5‬ﺃﻭ ‪ AV6‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 132
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻭﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻭﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮ ًﺩﺍ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ AV-5، AV-6‬ﻟﺪﻭﻧﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ(‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪S-video‬‬ ‫‪TV-out‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪S-video‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪DVI‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ DVI/HDMI‬ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Dell‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 136
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ S-video‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ connector‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ .VGA‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 137
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ‪) Displayport‬ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺮﺣﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫"™‪ - DisplayPort‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 55‬ﻭ‬ ‫"™‪ "DisplayPort‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.329‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ‪ .HDMI‬ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ DVI :‬ﻭ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺎﻥ ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .
PAGE 138
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻺﺑﺤﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻔﻬﻢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻐﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫™‪DisplayPort‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (DVI‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫)‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻀﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫‪ RCA‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻷﻧﺎﻟﻮﺝ( ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ S/PDIF‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻞ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺖﻟﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Windows Media‬‬ ‫‪ ،Player‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪) Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ‬ ‫ ‪Help and‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪216‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD/DVD‬ﻭﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 5.
PAGE 142
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 143
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪(CL) Cyberlink‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪ CL‬ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ ،DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫‪ DVD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.
PAGE 144
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ S/PDIF‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻭﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(S/PDIF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) All Programs‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫‪.DVD‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،DVD‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ‪) DVD Audio Setting DVD‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 145
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Dell Travel Remote‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ Dell‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ Dell‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ Windows Vista‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪.
PAGE 146
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Media Player‬ﺑﺎﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Media Player‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 147
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ )ﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪(MP3‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ )ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪،(MP3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ "‪Using Windows Media‬‬ ‫‪) "Player‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ (Windows Media Player‬ﻓﻲ ‪Windows Help‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.
PAGE 148
‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 5.1‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5.1‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ )‪.(LFE‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ 5.1‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪.
PAGE 149
‫ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ c‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺻﺎً ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻐﻠﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪:‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ )ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪.
PAGE 150
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺻﺎ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD‬ﻭ‪DVD‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﺳﻢ‬ ‫)‪ 4.7‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD‬ﻭ‪.DVD‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‪.
PAGE 151
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪ CDs‬ﻭ‪ DVDs‬ﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ™‪Blu-ray‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪ CD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪Blu-ray‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻼﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﺭﺍﺝ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻐﻞ‪.
PAGE 152
‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪CD/DVD‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 5.1‬ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪MP3‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ(‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ Dell‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ CD/DVD‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﺸﻐﻼﺕ ‪ MP3‬ﻭﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 153
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ( ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ ‪) System and Maintenance‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ( ‪) Backup and Restore Center‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Back up ﬁles‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‪ .
PAGE 154
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ")‪) "Create contact groups (mailing lists‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺳﻼﺕ( ﻓﻲ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪:‬‬ ‫ ‪Help and Support‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪.Express‬‬ ‫ ‪) Programs‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪Outlook‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ‪) Address Book‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 155
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ ،Outlook Express‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ "‪To send an e-mail‬‬ ‫‪) "message‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪Outlook‬‬ ‫‪.Express‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺳﻼﺕ(‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺳﻼﺕ( ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﻠﻘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺘﻠﻘﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 156
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍً ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻠﻘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪.Mail‬‬ ‫ ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) File‬ﻣﻠﻒ( ‪) New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ‪) Mail Message‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ( ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻠﻖ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ‪) To‬ﺇﻟﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ٍ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ‪) Subject‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ‪.
PAGE 157
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺤﺠﺐ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ‪Information‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻹﺧﺒﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻭﺗﺴﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺠﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.
PAGE 158
‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪.Express‬‬ ‫ ‪) Programs‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪Outlook‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Tools‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ( ‪) Options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪Security‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺖ ‪) Download Images‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪Block images and‬‬ ‫‪) other external content in HTML e-mail‬ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.
PAGE 159
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪.Mail‬‬ ‫ ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Tools‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ( ‪) Junk e-mail Options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪) No Automatic Filtering‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .
PAGE 160
‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪.Express‬‬ ‫ ‪) Programs‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪Outlook‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ ،Outlook Express‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪.
PAGE 161
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪) "Organize e-mail using rules and folders‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ( ﻓﻲ ‪Windows Help and‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ (Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.
PAGE 162
‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Mail‬ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ‪.(Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) File‬ﻣﻠﻒ( ‪) Folder‬ﻣﺠﻠﺪ( ‪) New‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Select the folder in which to create the new folder‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻴﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 163
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫"‪) "Getting started with e-mail‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪) Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ (Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ( ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ‪:Windows‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Mail‬ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ‪.(Windows‬‬ ‫ ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Tools‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ( ‪) Accounts‬ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎﺕ(‪.
PAGE 164
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺋﻠﺘﻚ ﻭﺃﺻﺪﻗﺎﺋﻚ ﻭﺯﻣﻼﺋﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﻮﻓﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺎً ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.
PAGE 165
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻈﺮ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪) Cookies‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ( ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺷﻔﺮﺓ( ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻚ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺎ‪ .
PAGE 166
‫ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺑﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺃﻣﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮﺓ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Network and‬‬ ‫‪) Internet Connections‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ( ‪Internet Options‬‬ ‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ(‪.
PAGE 167
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺠﺎء ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪(TCP/IP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫‪) TCP/IP‬ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ )‪ (TCP‬ﻭﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪.
PAGE 168
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻻﺣﻘﺎً ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪ Internet Explorer‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Favorites‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ( ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪Favorites‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ( ‪) Add to Favorites‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Favorites‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ( ‪) Organize Favorites‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ(‪.
PAGE 169
‫‪ 5‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪) Notiﬁcations and Filter level‬ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ( ﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻈﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ ‪) Filter level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) Low‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‪،‬‬ ‫‪) Medium‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ‪) High‬ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ( ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.
PAGE 170
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻕ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﻗﺮﺃ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺠﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺄﻟﻮﻓﺎً ﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﺬ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻮﻕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺳﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺁﻣﻨﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺗﺴﻮﻕ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺎً؟‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﻳﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﻟﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 171
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪) Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ‬ ‫ ‪Help and‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫"ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ"‬ ‫ ‬ ‫"ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ"‬ ‫ ‬ ‫"ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﺜﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ"‪.
PAGE 172
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﺲ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪) Spyware‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﺲ( ﻫﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻹﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻣﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Malware‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻹﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 173
‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Don’t allow exceptions‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎءﺍﺕ(‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﺳﻞ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Windows‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) Windows Firewall‬ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ (Windows‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪) General‬ﻋﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪Exceptions‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎءﺍﺕ(‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪Advanced‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) General‬ﻋﺎﻡ( ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ‪) On :‬ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ( ﻭ‪Off‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻐﻠﻖ(‪ .
PAGE 174
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺛﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﻔﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺁﻟﻴﺎً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ .Windows‬ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 175
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺘﻚ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺇﻋﻼﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ )‪.
PAGE 176
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺬﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻌﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺼﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻘﺪﻣﺎً ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.
PAGE 177
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ‪ Internet Explorer‬ﺑﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻹﺳﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﻗﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺳﺠﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Network and‬‬ ‫‪) Internet Connections‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ( ‪Internet Options‬‬ ‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ(‪.
PAGE 178
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﻭﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Network and‬‬ ‫‪) Internet Connections‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ( ‪Internet Options‬‬ ‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 179
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪:Internet Explorer‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ‪ Internet Explorer‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Tools‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ( ‪Internet Options‬‬ ‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Network and‬‬ ‫‪) Internet Connections‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ( ‪Internet Options‬‬ ‫)ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪) Internet Options‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ(‪ .
PAGE 180
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ )‪) Broadband (PPPoE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ )‪ ((PPPoE‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Wireless‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Dial-up‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻲ( ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Broadband‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ‪DSL‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪.
PAGE 181
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ )‪) ،Broadband (PPPoE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ )‪ ((PPPoE‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Wireless‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ﺃﻭ ‪) ،Dial-up‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻲ( ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Broadband‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ‪DSL‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﻗﻤﺮ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪.
PAGE 182
‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪ )‪ (URL‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻬﺎ ‪ .URL‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻊ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻫﻮ‪.http://www.dell.com :‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ‪ Dell Support‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.support.dell.com‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪.
PAGE 183
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ‪ DSL‬ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪ (WWAN‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪.
PAGE 184
‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻫﻮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺇﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ )ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺳﺴﺎﺕ( ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻘﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ )ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺭﺑﻂ ﻧﺺ ﺗﺸﻌﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﺸﻌﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ )ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ(‪.
PAGE 185
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Dell Control-‬‬ ‫‪ ،Point‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ControlPoint‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪Intel® Active Management‬‬ ‫‪) Technology‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪Dell Intel® Active Management Technology‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ( )‪ Intel AMT‬ﺃﻭ ®‪ (iAMT‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .
PAGE 186
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ ControlPoint‬ﻣﻦ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Dell ControlPoint‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪Dell ControlPoint‬‬ ‫)‪.(DCP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪DC‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Dell ControlPoint‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ّ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .
PAGE 187
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ™‪Wi-Fi Catcher‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ "‪) "About Your Computer‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi Catcher‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Dell‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.
PAGE 188
‫ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﺎﻣﺔ )‪(Hotspots‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻠﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )‪ (VPN‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪hotspot‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪.
PAGE 189
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪(WLAN‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )‪.(SSID‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ]‪ ([SSID‬ﺍﻟﻠﺬﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﺼﻨّﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺘﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 190
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻴًﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﺟﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺃﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ً‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 191
‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ WiMAX‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻭ‪ .DSL‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ IEEE 802.16‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ‪ WirelessMAN‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺑﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪WPAN‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ WPAN‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 192
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 193
‫ﺇﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﻗﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ ExpressCard‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Mini Card‬ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‪.
PAGE 194
‫ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪(WWAN‬‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪ ،(WWAN‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻺﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭﺳﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪ ،(WLAN‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1000‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 195
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺿﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Dell‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺎ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.
PAGE 196
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ .
PAGE 197
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Wireless Network Connection‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ‪View‬‬ ‫‪) Wireless Networks‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Connect‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺁﻣﻨﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ WEP‬ﺃﻭ ‪ WPA‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻃﻠﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.
PAGE 198
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪(WLAN‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪ (ISP‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺳﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 199
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﺘﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻓﺤﺺ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 200
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪(WLAN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪ (WLAN‬ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 201
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪ (ISP‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺒﻌﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺫﻱ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺳﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‪.
PAGE 202
‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻪ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ‪ DSL‬ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.155‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪ -‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻻﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .
PAGE 203
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪ (LAN‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ ﺑﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﻱ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪ (WLAN‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺷﺪﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ)®‪) Active Management Technology (Intel AMT or iAMT‬ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ®‪ Intel AMT) Intel‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ((iAMT‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ .
PAGE 204
‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ )‪ ،LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ(‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪LAN‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻔﺢ ﺷﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.
PAGE 205
‫‪152‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ(‬
PAGE 206
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ControlPoint‬ﻣﻦ ™‪Dell‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Dell ControlPoint‬ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫)‪ Dell ControlPoint (DCP‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ Dell ControlPoint‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Dell ControlPoint‬ﻭﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪) Day Battery mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ( ﺃﻭ ‪Extended Battery Life‬‬ ‫‪) mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ(‪.
PAGE 207
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻊ ™‪ ،Dell™ ExpressCharge‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﺎً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 80‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 100‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻷﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ‪.
PAGE 208
‫ﻓﻬﻢ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺿﻴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﻤﻠﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ )‪ (Hibernate‬ﺁﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻧﻔﺎﺫ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ 90‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎﺋﺔ‪ .
PAGE 209
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪Microsoft Windows‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) Power Meter‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻘــﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻀﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .
PAGE 210
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Dell‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ .Dell‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻚ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 211
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) Power Meter‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) Power Meter‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.
PAGE 212
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻈﻢ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺒﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻼﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 213
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺬﺑﺬﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﺣﻴﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﻓﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 214
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ )‪ (Hibernate‬ﺑﺘﺮﺷﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﺠﻮﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‪.
PAGE 215
‫ ‬ ‫‪) Power Meter‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ )ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ(‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪) Advanced‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ( ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪) Hibernate‬ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ( ‪ -‬ﺣﺪﺩﻩ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪) Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.
PAGE 216
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻎ ﺍﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪Lock‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ(‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Hibernate‬ﺳﺒﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 217
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ‪Windows Help‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻌ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﻣﺮﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 218
‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﺧﻄﻂ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻠﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺧﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺛﻨﻴﻦ‪ .
PAGE 219
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺜﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺠﺴﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﺨﺒﺎﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺴﺎﺩ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻤﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺩﺧﻮﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻓﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺴﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫"ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 220
‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺠﺰﺋﺘﻪ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Analyze‬ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Defragment‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ( ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) My Computer‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) File‬ﻣﻠﻒ( ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Tools‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ( ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Check Now‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻵﻥ(‪.
PAGE 221
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻧﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ؟‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﺋﺘﻪ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﻤﻊ ﻣﺰﻳﻞ ﺗﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻛﻞ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .
PAGE 222
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ‪ ،NVIDIA‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ESA‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜ ّﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜ ّﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻀﻤّﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ NVIDIA‬ﻟـ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 223
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ESA‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜ ّﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻜ ّﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻤﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺒﺮﺓ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺩﺍء‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ‪.
PAGE 224
‫‪) Local Security Policy‬ﺳﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ( ‪ -‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Performance‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍء( ‪ -‬ﻳﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺍﻍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 225
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) System and Maintenance‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ( ‪Performance‬‬ ‫‪) Information and Tools‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء(‪.
PAGE 226
‫‪ 1‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ )ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻒ‪ .
PAGE 227
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺐﻳﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻴﻨﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﻛﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪Windows Help ،‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ ‪) Dell™ safety information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪(Dell‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 228
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﻣﻬﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ )ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻬﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺠﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻷﺑﻄﺄ ﻋﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ً‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻂء ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪.
PAGE 229
‫‪128‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‬
PAGE 230
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﺁﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﻧﻬﺎء )ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ( ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) Task Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ(‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻘﺮﺍً ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Task Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Applications‬ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ( ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪Windows Task‬‬ ‫‪) Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ‪ ،(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫‪) End Task‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ(‪.
PAGE 231
‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Add‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) or Remove Programs‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Remove Program‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Remove‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪) Add or Remove Programs‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪.
PAGE 232
‫‪Windows® XP‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Add‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) or Remove Programs‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Add a program‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎ‪e‬ﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ‪) Category‬ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺎﺕ( ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Install‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 233
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Open‬ﻓﺘﺢ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Run‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Save‬ﺣﻔﻆ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺸﻒ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍً ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺜﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ .
PAGE 234
‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ CD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫®‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ CD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﺘﻚ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ‪setup.exe‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ ،install.exe‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.
PAGE 235
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪System and‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Maintenance‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ( ‪) Backup and Restore Center‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Restore ﬁles‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Restore computer‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.
PAGE 236
‫‪ 5‬ﻓﻲ ‪) Backup destination‬ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) File‬ﻣﻠﻒ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﻓﻲ ‪) Backup media‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻤًﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ )‪ (.
PAGE 237
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪System and‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Maintenance‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ( ‪) Welcome Center‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ( ‬ ‫‪) Transfer ﬁles and settings‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Back up ﬁles‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺃﻭ ‪Back up computer‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.
PAGE 238
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows XP‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Windows Easy Transfer‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ Windows Vista DVD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪.Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Transfer‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.
PAGE 239
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﺟﺰ ًء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﺪﻳﻚ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﻣﻌﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﺭﻛﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﺭﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﺭﻳﺢ ﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.
PAGE 240
‫‪ 3‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ‪) Permission Level‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺮﻳﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﺭﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ‪) Reader‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺭﺉ( ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ‪) Contributor‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻙ( ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺷﺎﺭﻙ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ‪) Co-owner‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻙ( ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Share‬ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 241
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ‪Recycle‬‬ ‫‪) Bin‬ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻓﺮﺍﻍ‬ ‫‪) Recycle Bin‬ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ‪) ،Recycle Bin‬ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ( ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍً ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) Recycle Bin‬ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪Empty Recycle‬‬ ‫‪) Bin‬ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺎﺕ( ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) File‬ﻣﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪Share‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ(‪.
PAGE 242
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰ ًء ﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰ ًء ﻣﻦ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ‪) Search‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪
PAGE 243
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍً ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﻪ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) File‬ﻣﻠﻒ( ‪) Save‬ﺣﻔﻆ(‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ X‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) File‬ﻣﻠﻒ( ‪) Save As‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ(‪.
PAGE 244
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪SHIFT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫>‪ ‪
PAGE 245
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ Microsoft® Windows® Explorer‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪ ،Explorer‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ‪) Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ‬ ‫ ‪Help and‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.
PAGE 246
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ‪) Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪:(Windows‬‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.
PAGE 247
‫‪110‬‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
PAGE 248
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻫﻮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.Windows‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ "‪) "Safe Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ Windows‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ .
PAGE 249
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻤﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻤﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 8‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﻌﺎﺩ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 250
‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء( ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ .Windows‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫‪) Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.
PAGE 251
‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎء ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺣﻔﻆ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‪) Undock Computer‬ﻓﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎء‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﻔﻚ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ (1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎء ﻭﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (2‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺃﺑﺪﺍً ﺑﻔﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﻩ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .
PAGE 252
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎء ﻭﻓﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ -‬ﻓﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎء‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ )‪ (ACPI‬ﻫﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﺎﻫﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪ ACPI‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﺅﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪.
PAGE 253
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) Task Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ( ﻹﻧﻬﺎء )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎً ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،Windows Explorer‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.MSTask‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪Task Manager‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ( ‪) Processes‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Process‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ( ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫‪) End Process‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ(‪.
PAGE 254
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﺪﺍً‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ Windows‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ ﺁﻟﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪) Task Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍً ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Task Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ(‪.
PAGE 255
‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ‪) Turn off computer‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ‪) Turn Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ‪:Windows Help and Support‬‬ ‫ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.
PAGE 256
‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪ Microsoft® Windows‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫)ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪lock‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Shut Down‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows® XP‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Turn Off‬ﺍﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.
PAGE 257
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ RAID‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪) RAID‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ "RAID‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(89‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪) Programs‬ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‪Intel(R) Matrix Storage‬‬ ‫‪ Intel Matrix Storage Console Manager‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪Intel‬‬ ‫‪.Storage Utility‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Actions‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ( ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.
PAGE 258
‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Actions‬ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ( ﺣﺪﺩ ‪Create RAID Volume From‬‬ ‫‪) Existing Hard Drive‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ‪ RAID‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪) Migration Wizard‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Migration Wizard‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻤﺎً ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ‪ RAID‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫>‪.
PAGE 259
‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺎً ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪) Selected‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪) Specify Volume Size‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫‪) Volume Size‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ( ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء( ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Back‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ( ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ RAID‬ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 260
‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Actions‬ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Create RAID Volume‬ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ‪ (RAID‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ ،RAID Volume Wizard‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Select Volume Location‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ RAID‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ ،0‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ RAID‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪ ،0‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ .
PAGE 261
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪RAID 0‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻤﻴﻦ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪RAID0) (Stripe) RAID0‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ((‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ‪ .RAID‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 128‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻤﻴﻦ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ‪) Drives‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫>‪.
PAGE 262
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪Intel® RAID Utilities‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪ Intel‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫"ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ RAID 0‬ﺃﻭ ‪ RAID 1‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.95‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫"ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ RAID‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 0‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.96‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫"ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ RAID‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 0‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.96‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫"ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ RAID‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 263
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Delete Array‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) System Tasks‬ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ‪) NVIDIA Delete Array Wizard‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪.(NVIDIA‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ‪) RAID Mode Selection‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،(RAID‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Mirroring‬ﻧﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Striping‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪.
PAGE 264
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪RAID‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ RAID 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﺑﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ RAID‬ﻭﺑﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻠﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ‪ ،RAID 0‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺪﻣﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ RAID‬ﻭﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ‪ RAID‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.
PAGE 265
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ RAID‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ Nvidia MediaShield‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ RAID‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺻﻠﺐ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺫﻱ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ) ﺑﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‪ (RAID‬ﻭﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮ ﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪RAID‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ )ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ( ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‪.
PAGE 266
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ >‪ ‪
PAGE 267
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ‪ RAID On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ RAID‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫>‪.‪ ‪
PAGE 268
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ RAID‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ RAID‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 5‬ﺗﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ّ .‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ‪ RAID‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ) ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺎﺛﻞ(‪ .‬ﻭﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺍً ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﺟﻴﺪﺍً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻟﺤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 269
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ RAID‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪0+1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ ‪ RAID‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 0+1‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‬ ‫‪ RAID‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 0‬ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ RAID‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﻘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺄﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻟﺤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 270
‫‪ RAID‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ‪ RAID‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ‪ RAID‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻀﺤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪RAID 1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪ .
PAGE 271
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪ RAID‬ﻣﺜﻞ )‪ .(50 ،10 ،5‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪.support.dell.com‬‬ ‫‪ RAID‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪0‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 0‬ﻣﻦ ‪ RAID‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 0‬ﻣﻦ ‪ RAID‬ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 272
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ‪ -‬ﺇﻥ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪- Check Disk‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ ‪) Computer‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪:Windows® XP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) My Computer‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Local Disk‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ( )‪.
PAGE 273
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ‪-‬‬ ‫®‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪ CD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (BD) Blu-ray Disc‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 274
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪Computer‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ( ‪) Device Manager‬ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍً ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎً ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻪ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪) Audio ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ﺃﻭ ‪) Video‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ((‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍً ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎً ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻪ‪.
PAGE 275
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Device Driver Rollback‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪) System Restore‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ®‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫®‪ "Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (267‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪Drivers and Utilities‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‪.
PAGE 276
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺑﺼﻼﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪.
PAGE 277
‫‪ 4‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﻧﺎً ﻟﻠﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Continue‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.vssadmin list shadowstorage‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ >‪.
PAGE 278
‫ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪ Microsoft® Windows Vista‬ﺑﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ً‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻛﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺺﻟﺐ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Computer‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪) C‬ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ(‪.
PAGE 279
‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪) InstallShield Wizard Complete‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬ ‫‪ ، (InstallShield‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪) Drivers and Utilities‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء( ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪) Drivers and Utilities‬ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ( ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ‪.Windows‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Welcome Dell System Owner‬ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﺑﻤﺎﻟﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،(Dell‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Next‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ(‪.
PAGE 280
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.
PAGE 281
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻛﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪Set as Default Printer‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺗُﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ .
PAGE 282
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Hardware‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) and Sound‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ‪) Printers‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ(‪.
PAGE 283
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .36‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ‪) Microsoft® Windows® Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‪Help and‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﻴﻦ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻫﻜﺬﺍ‪.
PAGE 284
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪-‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻡﻋﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﻣﺼﻨّﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪.
PAGE 285
‫‪72‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬
PAGE 286
‫>‪‪ ‪ ‪ ‪ ‪ ‪ ‪‪‪‪‪‪‪
PAGE 287
‫ﺇﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫>‪‪‪ ‪ ‪‪‪‪‪‪‪‪‪‪‪‪‪‪‪‪‪
PAGE 288
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ‪ .
PAGE 289
‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Toolbars‬ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Language bar‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺯﺭ ‪) Input language‬ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺯﺭ ‪) Keyboard layout‬ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 290
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺰﻭﺩﻙ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ /‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪
PAGE 291
‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪، ، :‬‬ ‫>‪ ، ، ، ،
PAGE 292
‫ﺇﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ USB‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻗﻌﺖ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲء ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﻠﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪.
PAGE 293
‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Touch Pointer‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ( ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪Show the touch pointer when I’m interacting with items on the‬‬ ‫‪) screen‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows® XP‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Printers and Other Hardware‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ( ‪Pen and‬‬ ‫‪) Input Devices‬ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.
PAGE 294
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Scrolling‬ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﺰﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﺰﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.
PAGE 295
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪) Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.
PAGE 296
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) General‬ﻋﺎﻡ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪Services‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪Services‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 297
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻃﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻟﻄﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻧﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻔﺦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﻫﻮﺍء ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻤﺴﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﺑﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻳﺰﻭﺑﺮﻭﺑﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺧﺮﺟﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‪ .
PAGE 298
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪Hardware‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) and Sound‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ( ‪) Mouse‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Wheel‬ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) Mouse Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ( ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 299
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺭﻳﻦ ﻭﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ )ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ )ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻨﻚ(‪.
PAGE 300
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ )ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻭﻋﺼﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ( ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Microsoft‬‬ ‫®‪.Windows‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ :Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.
PAGE 301
‫‪56‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
PAGE 302
‫™‪ - DisplayPort‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺋﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Dell‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻭﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺮﺍﻓﻴﻜﺲ ﻭﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺑﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ DisplayPort‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 303
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻛﺒﻼﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺪﻫﻤﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 304
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫>‪
PAGE 305
‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪Display Properties‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺧﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 306
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ‪Windows Help and‬‬ ‫‪) Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ (Windows‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Personalize‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪Personalize appearance‬‬ ‫‪) and sounds‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Display Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.
PAGE 307
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Personalize‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ(‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪Personalize appearance‬‬ ‫‪) and sounds‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Display Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪) Display Settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 308
‫‪Windows® XP‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ(‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ Display Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪) Screen resolution‬ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Apply‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ( ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪4‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪.4‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 309
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺭﺩ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .246‬ﻭﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫‪) Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Start‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 310
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.www.dell.
PAGE 311
‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Performance and Maintenance‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﻢ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺳﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) Device Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ( ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 312
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪Control Panel‬‬ ‫)ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪ .‬ﺛﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻧﺺ ﻣﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ‪ Windows‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫"‪) "Windows Basics‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ (Windows‬ﻓﻲ ‪Windows Help and‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.
PAGE 313
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ‪ Windows‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫"‪) "Windows Basics‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ (Windows‬ﻓﻲ ‪Windows Help and‬‬ ‫‪) Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Add or Remove Programs‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪.
PAGE 314
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻔﺘﺢ ﺯﺭ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪) Windows Help and Support Center‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ Windows‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺇﻏﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 315
‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ(‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﺎﻓﺬﺓ ‪ Display Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Screen Saver‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 316
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺭﺳﻮﻣًﺎ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻁ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻼ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Personalize‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ(‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪Personalize appearance‬‬ ‫‪) and sounds‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‪.
PAGE 317
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‬ ‫‪) Appearance and Personalization‬ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Personalization‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ(‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪Personalize‬‬ ‫‪) appearance and sounds‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows® XP‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Display‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 318
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪Start‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪Display‬‬ ‫‪Properties‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪) Display Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺳﻤﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮﻩ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Display Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 319
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ‪ Windows‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻮﻋﺎ ﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ )ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ(‪.
PAGE 320
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺬﻓﺖ ً‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰﺍ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺬﻓﺖ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ‪ Windows‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬ ‫"‪) "Windows Basics‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ (Windows‬ﻓﻲ ‪Windows Help and‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪) Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ :(Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.
PAGE 321
‫‪ 3‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ®‪ Windows Vista‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪) Notiﬁcation Area‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫®‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows XP‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Customize‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﻠﻮﻛﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.
PAGE 322
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪Taskbar and Start Menu‬‬ ‫‪) Properties‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Taskbar‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ( ﺣﺪﺩ ‪Keep the taskbar on top‬‬ ‫‪) of other windows‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻃﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.
PAGE 323
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪Start‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮ ًﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﻉ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 324
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ‪Microsoft Windows‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪Start‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ®‪ Microsoft® Windows‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺪء‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻣﻮﺯﺍ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ .Windows‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮ ًﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 325
‫ﻣﻨﺘﺪﻳﺎﺕ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ BIOS‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻳُﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ BIOS‬ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ BIOS‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﻚ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ‪.
PAGE 326
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Dell‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﻭﻟﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺍﺗﻴﺮ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻗﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻒ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺎً‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺩﻭﻻﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺧﺼﻢ ‪Dell‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﻼﻍ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺮﻭﻕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺪ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺎً‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻋﻘﻮﺩ ﻭﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ ‬
PAGE 327
‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺩﻋﻢ ‪ Dell support.dell.com‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻹﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ‪.Dell‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.Dell‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.Dell‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺪﻳﺎﺕ ‪ :Dell‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﺪﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪.Dell‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻨﺎ‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪.
PAGE 328
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫‪Windows Help‬‬ ‫‪and Support Center‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‪) Microsoft Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ (Microsoft Windows‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 329
‫ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ‬ ‫ ‪) All Programs‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ( ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Accessories‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ( ‪) System Tools‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ‪System‬‬ ‫‪) Information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) File‬ﻣﻠﻒ( ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Export‬ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ‪) File name‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﺪﻟﺔ ‪) Save as type‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﻮﻉ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Save‬ﺣﻔﻆ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.
PAGE 330
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪System and‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Maintenance‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ( ‪) System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ‪) Device Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ( )ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪) Tasks‬ﻣﻬﻤﺎﺕ((‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows® XP‬‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Performance and Maintenance‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ( ‪) System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫‪) Hardware‬ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ( ‪) Device Manager‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ(‪.
PAGE 331
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪Start‬‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫)ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 332
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ ‪) Control Panel‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ( ‪System and‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Maintenance‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ( ‪) System‬ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows® XP‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ( ‪) Dell User and System guides‬ﺃﺩﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪) Pick a Topic‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎً(‪.
PAGE 333
‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻓﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ‪Microsoft Windows‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻮﻻ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Windows Help and Support‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺩﻋﻢ ‪:(Windows‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ ‪) Help and Support‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 334
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ(‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪ Microsoft® Windows‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪Start‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ Windows‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Windows‬ﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ‪.
PAGE 335
‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
PAGE 336
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪323.................................................................. VGA‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪324..................................................................DVI-I‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪325.......................................... S-Video‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ‪326...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ‪327..................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪328.................................................................HDMI‬‬ ‫™‪329..........
PAGE 337
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪303....................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ‪304...................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪305...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪307........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪308.............................................Dell‬‬ ‫‪ 21‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪309.............................................
PAGE 338
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪271.............................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪271.............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Windows XP‬ﺃﻭ ‪272...........Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ 20‬ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪273.........................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪274.......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻴﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ ‪275......................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺼﻴﺔ ﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺒﻴﺔ ‪276......................
PAGE 339
‫ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪257...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪257....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻱ ‪257...................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪258...................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ‪258........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ‪259....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﺮﻭﺳﺎﺕ ‪259.......
PAGE 340
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪242......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Setting Display Resolution With‬‬ ‫‪the Windows Display Properties‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪243............................................... (Windows‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Settings Tab‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ‪Display Properties Menu‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ‪244...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪) Advanced‬ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻡ( ‪245................................
PAGE 341
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪215.......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪215................... Windows Media Player‬‬ ‫‪ 16‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪217........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪217.....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪217...........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻪ‪219.....................
PAGE 342
‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺍﺳﻼﺕ(‪202..................................‬‬ ‫‪202................................................. Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪203.................................................... Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪204................................‬‬ ‫‪204................................................. Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪204.................................................... Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪ 15‬ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪CD/DVD‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ 5.
PAGE 343
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﺳﺮﻱ‪188..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ‪189.....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪189.......................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪190................(TCP/IP‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪190..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪191...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻔﺢ‪191.........................
PAGE 344
‫‪ 13‬ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ‪173.................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ‪173...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻪ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪173........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪174...........................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ‪175.........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪175........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪175................................
PAGE 345
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪157.............................(WLAN‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺟﻪ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪157.......................................... WLAN‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪158..................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪158.......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ )‪159............. (WLAN‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ‪162.....................................................
PAGE 346
‫‪ 11‬ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ( ‪139....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪139........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪139................................ Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪141...................................................Windows® XP‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪144.........................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪144.................................................
PAGE 347
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪125...............................................‬‬ ‫‪125................................................. Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪126.................................................... Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪126..............................................‬‬ ‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻬﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ )ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻦ( ‪129......‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻬﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪129.........‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪130..........................................................
PAGE 348
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪115 ...............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪115 .................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪116 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫‪116 ................................................. Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪117 .................................................... Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ‪118 .................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ‪118 ..............
PAGE 349
‫‪ 7‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪101........................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪101................................ Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪101...................................................Windows® XP‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪102...............................................................‬‬ ‫®‪102.............................. Microsoft® Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪102...................................................Windows® XP‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪103..............................................
PAGE 350
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪79............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ‪79...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺟﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ‪79....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻲ ‪80.....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪80................................................. (SSD‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ‪81....................................
PAGE 351
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﻲ(‪63.........‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪63.................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪64.................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪) USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ( ‪64.....................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪65.....................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪65..................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪66.............................................
PAGE 352
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪47................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪47...............................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪47.................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪48.................................. Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪49.....................................................Windows® XP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪49.........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ‪49........................................
PAGE 353
‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ‪33................Microsoft Windows‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ‪33.....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ‪34...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ‪34..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ‪35....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ‪35.................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ‪35....................
PAGE 354
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪23....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Start‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ( ‪23............................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻋﻢ‪24......................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ®‪25.................................. Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪25.....................................................Windows® XP‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪26....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ‪26....................
PAGE 355
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺗُﻌﻠﻤﻚ ﺑﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ "ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻤﺘﻠﻜﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 356
Dell™ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ w w w. d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l .